operation manual

ManualsBrandsPhilips ManualsAndroid6000 series Ultraflacher Full-HD-Fernseher powered by Android™

6402 series

www.philips.com/welcome

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

32PFS6402

Summary of content (198 pages)

PAGE 1
Register your product and get support at 6402 series www.philips.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.2‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪- 2.1‬‬ ‫‪- 2.2‬‬ ‫‪- 2.3‬‬ ‫‪- 2.4‬‬ ‫‪- 2.5‬‬ ‫‪- 2.6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪ - 4.
PAGE 3
‫‪ - 18.3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫‪ - 19‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪- 19.1‬‬ ‫‪- 19.2‬‬ ‫‪- 19.3‬‬ ‫‪- 19.4‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪TV on Demand‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪Netflix - 20‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪ - 21‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ - 21.1‬ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪21.2 - HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪21.3 - Nettv‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬ﻭ ‪21.4 - Nettv‬‬ ‫‪ - 22‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪- 22.1‬‬ ‫‪- 22.2‬‬ ‫‪- 22.3‬‬ ‫‪- 22.4‬‬ ‫‪- 22.
PAGE 4
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴّﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠًﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴّﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .
PAGE 5
‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ( ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﻏﺎﻥٍ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻤ‪/‬ﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪ ،VESA‬ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻣؤﻫﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 7
‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ‪ IEC Coax 75‬ﺃﻭﻡ ‪.RF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.DVB-C DVB-T‬‬ ‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪F‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪ SAT‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 8
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪  - 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SOURCES  - 2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪    - 3‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻠﻮّﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪INFO 4‬‬‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻥّ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Android TV Remote Control‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ &‬‫‪ ; quot &Android TV Remote Control ;quot‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪.Play‬‬ ‫‪Android‬‬ ‫‪TV‬‬ ‫‪Remote‬‬ ‫‪Control‬‬ ‫* ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.
PAGE 10
‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3.
PAGE 11
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻴء‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .HOME ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎ‪/‬ﻻﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪LNB Homing‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎ‪/‬ﻻﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ homing‬ﻭﻛﻞ ‪ . LNB‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪.Unicable‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺮﺳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎ‪/‬ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎ‪/‬ﻻﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻄﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬‬‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ & ‪;quot‬ﻗﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺎﻥ& ‪;.quot‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳؤﺩِ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ…‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ :‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) ‬ﻧﺠﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) ‬ﻗﻔﻞ( ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪،1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪HbbTV‬‬ ‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪II-I‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ HbbTV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪HbbTV‬ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻀﻤّﻨﺖ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺘَﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪HbbTV‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ < ‪HbbTV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪OK‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 6‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ 2.5‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪T.O.P‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪T.O.P‬‬ ‫‪..‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ‪. . .
PAGE 21
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ‪HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‬ ‫‪ .( HDCP‬ﺇﻥ ‪ HDCP‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ .Blu-ray‬ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫( ‪).
PAGE 22
‫‪HDMI CEC - EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓّﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺪﻣﺞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ) ‪ .( HD‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI DVI‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ‪ . HDCP -‬ﺇﻥ ‪ HDCP‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CI‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ( ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ‪ (CAM -‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.5‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ .5.
PAGE 24
‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪HTS -‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ARC HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﺸﻮّﺷًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺴﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ DTS‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ .DTS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ )ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬‫ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺰّﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ…(‪.‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.10‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪Scart‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﻛّﺐ ) ‪) CVBS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ) ‪ ( CVBS‬ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) SCART‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.SCART‬‬ ‫‪6.13‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬ﻭﺿَﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐّﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐّﺮﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ .
PAGE 28
‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‪ SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)EXIT ‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻃًﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ‪Scart /‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ YPbPr‬ﺃﻭ ‪SCART‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ) ‪) CVBS‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪SCART‬‬ ‫)ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.SCART‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .
PAGE 30
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ…‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪TV Android‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴ‪/‬ﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.O‬‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ ، WPS‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺤﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 6‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺒّﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ DNS 1‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪.DNS 2‬‬ ‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SIGN IN‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 6‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪OK‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖٍ ﻻﺣﻖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﻋﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 34
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ TV ;amp &Google Play Movies‬ﺃﻭ ‪Google Play‬‬ ‫‪Games‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪...‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺍؤﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪Google Play Movies‬‬ ‫& ‪TV ;amp‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍؤﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪Google Play Games‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،Google Play Music‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ، Google Play Music‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟـ ‪All‬‬ ‫‪ ، Access‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ‪ .Google Play Music‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 36
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Play Google‬‬ ‫‪ EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟ‪/‬ﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ ،Google Play‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺃﺿِﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ < ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. OK‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪9.1‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺼﻔّﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻔّﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥّ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣُﻌَﺪّ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺜﻼً(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ‪ ‬ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪10.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.2‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮًﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪...‬‬ ‫‪11.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 41
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ…‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ…‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ < ‪.Super Resolution‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻞﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﻋﻮﺿًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ < ﺻﻮﺕ…‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ‪EasyLink‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ‪Philips Hue bridge‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪.Hue‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪Ambilight‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﺑﺒﻄء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺸﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ - 3‬ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪Hue‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪ Hue‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 9‬ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪ Hue‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟـ ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Lounge Light+hue‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ، hue +Ambilight‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻉ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪hue‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪ Lounge Light‬ﻣﻦ ‪ . Ambilight‬ﺳﺘﻮﺳّﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪hue‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ Lounge Light‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﺤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪ hue‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪ Lounge Light‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ . hue +Ambilight‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪ hue‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪Lounge‬‬ ‫‪ ،Light‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Philips‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪.EasyLink..
PAGE 49
‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ HbbTV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪HbbTV‬ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪HbbTV‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ < ‪HbbTV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SUBTITLE‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻧﺺ ‪.T.O.P‬‬ ‫‪OPTIONS‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ،T.O.P‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪..T.O.P‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ(…‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ < ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪12.9‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ‪...‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ ‪4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬‬‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪13.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪USB‬‬ ‫* ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪™ .Dropbox‬‬ ‫‪13.4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ ‪4‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪:‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ ‪8‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫ ‪ 9‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪INFO ‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪13.
PAGE 55
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .TV GUIDE ‬ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) TV GUIDE ‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ*‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TV GUIDE ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠًﺎ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻟﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻞّ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞٍ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪...‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪15.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ…‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫‪16.3‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫‪Airplay‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ AirPlay‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ، Android TV‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩٍ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪.Google Play‬‬ ‫‪16.1‬‬ ‫‪16.4‬‬ ‫‪ Philips‬ﻣﻦ ‪TV Remote App‬‬ ‫‪MHL‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥّ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪™ .
PAGE 60
‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪17.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪...‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google Play‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google Play‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ ، Play‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .
PAGE 61
‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ Ambilight‬ﻻﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ Ambilight‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Ambilight‬‬ ‫‪18.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪…Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.AMBILIGHT ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪19.3‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪TV on Demand‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫‪19.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ & ‪;quot‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ& ‪ ;quot‬ﺃﻭ & ‪;quot‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ& ‪ ;quot‬ﺃﻭ & ‪;quot‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ& ‪ .;quot‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ & ‪;quot‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ& ‪ ;quot‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧًﺎ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪...‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOP PICKS ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺟﺮ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪Netflix‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ‪ Netflix‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Netflix‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ‪Netflix‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍً ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ‪ ، Netflix‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ . Netflix‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ‪Netflix‬ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪www.netflix.
PAGE 65
‫‪21.4‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬ﻭ ‪Nettv‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Nettv‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪Multi‬‬ ‫‪ View‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪21.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ *Multi View ‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،Multi View‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ :Multi View‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺪّﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ 3 -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪22.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗُﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﺎً ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 67
above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
PAGE 68
The original download site for this software is : http://ezxml.sourceforge.net.Copyright 2004, 2005 Aaron Voisine. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the MIT license, which can be found below. author's name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's software".
PAGE 69
read the following terms (Terms of Use). By downloading the Software and Document, you are deemed to agree to these terms.1. The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region (HKSARG) has the right to amend or vary the terms under this Terms of Use from time to time at its sole discretion.2.
PAGE 70
free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section)patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, transfer, and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of this implementation of VP8, where such license applies only to those patent claims, both currently owned by Google and acquired in the future, licensable by Google that are necessarily infringed by this implementation of VP8.
PAGE 71
EXPAT (2.1.0) U-boot is a boot loader for embedded boards based on ARM, MIPS and other processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application code EXPAT is a XML Parser. The original download site for this software is : http://expat.sourceforge.
PAGE 72
form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
PAGE 73
and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * Neither the name of The Android Open Source Project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
PAGE 74
Jackson Parser (2.x) PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANYTHEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Ipepg client uses Jackson Parser for string manipualation. The original download site for this -software is : https://github.
PAGE 75
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
PAGE 76
case, based on the explanations below. circumstances. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
PAGE 77
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
PAGE 78
the modified definitions.) irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. ?b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library.
PAGE 79
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
PAGE 80
modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
PAGE 81
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, stating that You changed the files; and publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. (c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works and that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, 3. Grant of Patent License.
PAGE 82
and assume any may provide additional or different license terms and conditions risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, 8. Limitation of Liability.
PAGE 83
file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following "[]" this sentence. boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets replaced with your own identifying information.
PAGE 84
Tim Wegner risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
PAGE 85
affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31). documentation and makefiles, at the very least. Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.
PAGE 86
Portions of this software are copyright ? The FreeType The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as """ specified below. Please replace with the value from the FreeType version you -------------- actually use.
PAGE 87
the terms files. of this license. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that ----------- states that the software is based in part of the work of the There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also o freetype@nongnu.org encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
PAGE 88
called "OpenSSL" please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. * nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written * OpenSSL License permission of the OpenSSL Project. --------------- * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * /* =========================== acknowledgment: * Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.
PAGE 89
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the Original SSLeay License ----------------------- * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. /* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * * All rights reserved.
PAGE 90
A. */ 1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License. _____________________________ MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1.1 1.8. "License" means this document. --------------- 1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum or extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant 1.0.1.
PAGE 91
reproduce, 1.11.
PAGE 92
without limitation and/or as part of a Larger Work; and Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone of this License released under Section 6.
PAGE 93
(c) the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that Representations. the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Section 3.
PAGE 94
distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the 3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions. You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code. requirements of Section 3.1-3.
PAGE 95
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER Code under the terms OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER. other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License. 8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate 6.3. Derivative Works.
PAGE 96
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR Sections 2.1 and/or 2.
PAGE 97
Covered Code as unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means that the Initial necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified A. any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law provisions.
PAGE 98
your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by libcurl (7.50.1) deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and libcurl is a free and easy-to-use client-side URL transfer library, supporting DICT, FILE, FTP, FTPS, Gopher, HTTP, HTTPS, IMAP, IMAPS, LDAP, LDAPS, POP3, POP3S, RTMP, RTSP, SCP, SFTP, SMTP, SMTPS, Telnet and TFTP.
PAGE 99
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 100
The original download site for this software is This piece of http://loopj.com/android-async-http/: software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache License 2.0 This software includes an implementation of the AES Cipher, licensed by Brian Gladman. The original download site for this software is This piece of software is http://www.gladman.me.uk/: licensed by Brian Gladman. httpclient-4.4.1.1 (4.4.1.
PAGE 101
The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. International Components for unicode. The original http://icu-project.orgdownload site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. libsqlite (3.9.2) libiprouteutil (3.4.0) SQLite database. The original download site for this This piece of software is http://www.sqlite.
PAGE 102
libpng (1.6.22beta) common Linux commands (and some special Android ones) into a single binary. This makes it more compact than having all those other commands installed individually. The original download site for this software is This piece of software https://android.googlesource.com/: is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG) -reference library (originally called pnglib).
PAGE 103
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
PAGE 104
compilation and installation of the library. Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.
PAGE 105
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote.
PAGE 106
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. place. d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
PAGE 107
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 14.
PAGE 108
GNU/Linux operating system. copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
PAGE 109
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
PAGE 110
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
PAGE 111
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.
PAGE 112
chromium-blapit.h Copyright (c) 2013 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. chromium-sha256.h Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: chromium-prtypes.h The following files contain portions distributed under the MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_domain.
PAGE 113
Font in any medium, without restriction, provided that you retain this license file (ARPHICPL.TXT) unaltered in all copies.
PAGE 114
s terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. Bitstream Vera Fonts Copyright The fonts have a generous copyright, allowing derivative works (as long as "Bitstream" or "Vera" are not in the names), and full redistribution (so long as they are not *sold* by themselves). They can be be bundled, redistributed and sold with any software.
PAGE 115
2. I want to package these fonts separately for distribution and THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, sale as part of a larger software package or system. Can I do so? EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF Yes. A RPM or Debian package is a "larger software package" to begin MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT with, and you aren't selling them independently by themselves.
PAGE 116
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION glyphs to the font, they must be stylistically in keeping with Vera's design. Vera cannot become a "ransom note" font. Jim Lyles will be 1. Definitions. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, providing a document describing the design elements used in Vera, as a and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. guide and aid for people interested in contributing to Vera.
PAGE 117
irrevocable form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
PAGE 118
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or (b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, stating that You changed the files; and (c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
PAGE 119
work. under this License. To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, "[]" boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, replaced with your own identifying information.
PAGE 120
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A This font also includes glyphs derived from Sazanami Gothic font which PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LABORATORY OR is created by Electronic Font Open Laboratory (/efont/). License for CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, Sazanami Gothic part is described in it's license. See attached EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, 'README.
PAGE 121
headers or projects, to support the font creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others. in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user. The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves.
PAGE 122
use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
PAGE 123
a) The modified work must itself be a software library. conditions might promote sharing better. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the libraries themselves.
PAGE 124
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
PAGE 125
distribute, If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
PAGE 126
* 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software * NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, without specific prior written permission.
PAGE 127
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2013 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). * * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * Copyright (C) 2001 - 2013, Daniel Stenberg, , et al. * SUCH DAMAGE. */ * * All rights reserved. David M.
PAGE 128
or without ============================== * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are Copyright (c) 2000-2007 Niels Provos * met: Copyright (c) 2007-2010 Niels Provos and Nick Mathewson * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * * Neither the name of Google Inc.
PAGE 129
* as above. Here's * Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of a list: * either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or Copyright (c) 2000 Dug Song Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California. * the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller
PAGE 130
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT code use may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, software without specific prior written permission.
PAGE 131
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at product * http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ documentation would be appreciated but is not required. * 3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must * Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, not be misrepresented as being the original software. * WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License 4.
PAGE 132
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete http://www.mozilla.org/projects/security/pki/nss/ URL: * the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under /* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK ***** * Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 * the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. * * * The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version * ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */ open-vcdiff * 1.
PAGE 133
* distribution. LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN * ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project boringssl https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl URL: * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.
PAGE 134
* the code are not to be removed. INTERRUPTION) * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * as the author of the parts of the library used.
PAGE 135
without * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS met: * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT notice, this list of conditions and the following discl
PAGE 136
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. src/de Copyright (c) 2009-2011 Christian Kohlschütter third_party/gwt_exporter Copyright 2007 Timepedia.
PAGE 137
shall be included distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
PAGE 138
- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE this software without specific prior written permission. ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 139
fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, Copyright © 2006 Behdad Esfahbod Copyright © 2005 David Turner its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. Copyright © 2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat, Inc. Copyright © 1998-2004 David Turner and Werner Lemberg This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. For full copyright notices consult the individual files in the package. All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
PAGE 140
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR assumed by the product vendor. OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR icu PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
PAGE 141
written authorization of the copyright holder. (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software 2. Chinese/Japanese Word Break Dictionary Data (cjdict.
PAGE 142
disclaimer. DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF L # * . Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright IABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR # * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED O # * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the # F THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
PAGE 143
# */ # # # * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions # Copyright 1996 Chih-Hao Tsai @ Beckman Institute, University of Illinois # c-tsai4@uiuc.edu http://casper.beckman.uiuc.edu/~c-tsai4 # # * are met: # * # * . Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright # ---------------COPYING.libtabe-----END---------------------------------- # * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - # * .
PAGE 144
# # Free Software applies to the current dictionary as well.
PAGE 145
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF 3. Lao Word Break Dictionary Data (laodict.txt) THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright (c) 2013 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved. ------------------------------------------------------------------------- http://code.google.com/p/lao-dictionary/ Project: 4. Burmese Word Break Dictionary Data (burmesedict.txt) -http://lao-dictionary.googlecode.com/git/LaoDictionary: Dictionary.
PAGE 146
http://code.google.com/p/google-jstemplate/ URL: BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT Khronos header files (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF http://www.khronos.org/registry URL: THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright (c) 2007-2010 The Khronos Group Inc.
PAGE 147
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in met: the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and
PAGE 148
not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to http://www.webrtc.org URL: acknowledge us. libjpeg http://www.ijg.org/ URL: Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it.
PAGE 149
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG software. (Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many implementations will support it.) this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
PAGE 150
Cosmin Truta License. Gilles Vollant You may obtain a copy of the License at and with the following additions to the disclaimer: http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software library or against infringement.
PAGE 151
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner source or altered source distribution. libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products.
PAGE 152
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions */ * are met: libusbx * http://libusb.org URL: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright libvpx http://www.webmproject.org URL: * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Copyright (c) 2010, The WebM Project authors. All rights reserved.
PAGE 153
-enforcement activity against any entity (including a cross claim or A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 154
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, ings in this Software without prior written authorization from him. OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN ---------------------------------------------------------------------- THE SOFTWARE.
PAGE 155
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, from him. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY libyuv THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT http://code.google.com/p/libyuv/ URL: (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE Copyright 2011 The LibYuv Project Authors. All rights reserved.
PAGE 156
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT // OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON // SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT // LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) AR
PAGE 157
* BRIAN PAUL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 158
or without // modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its // contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from are met: // this software without specific prior written permission. // 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright // THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
PAGE 159
the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under -http://mxr.mozilla.org/mozillaURL: central/source/modules/plugin/base/public/ the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 OpenMAX DL URL: https://silver.arm.com/download/Software/Graphics/OX00 0-BU-00010-r1p0-00bet0/OX000-BU-00010-r1p0-00bet0. tgz The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.
PAGE 160
- Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the for a particular purpose or non-infringement of any intellectual property. names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims any, warranties, express products derived from this software without specific prior written or implied, regarding the correctness, accuracy, completeness, timeliness, and reliability of these materials.
PAGE 161
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. PLY (Python Lex-Yacc) Version 3.4 Protocol Buffers re2 - an efficient, principled regular expression library http://protobuf.googlecode.com/svn/trunk URL: https://github.com/google/re2 URL: sfntly Code generated by the Protocol Buffer compiler is owned by the owner https://github.com/googlei18n/sfntly URL: of the input file used when generating it. This code is not standalone and requires a support library to be linked with it.
PAGE 162
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The author disclaims copyright to this source code.
PAGE 163
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT --- LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License used by X.
PAGE 164
distribution. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL * Neither the name of Google nor the names of its contributors may THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING without specific prior written permission.
PAGE 165
http://zlib.net/ URL: ;* ;* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any /* zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library ;* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above version 1.2.4, March 14th, 2010 ;* copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
PAGE 166
--- Copyright 2007, Google Inc. All rights reserved. The file url_parse.cc is based on nsURLParsers.cc from Mozilla. This file is Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without licensed separately as follows: modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version met: the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.
PAGE 167
This is release under the BSD license. you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under These libraries have their own licenses; we recommend you read them, the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. as their terms may differ from the terms below. V8 JavaScript Engine Further license information can be found in LICENSE files located in http://code.google.com/p/v8 URL: sub-directories.
PAGE 168
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - Neither the name of Sun Microsystems or the names of contributors may DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT specific prior written permission.
PAGE 169
https://git.fedorahosted.org/cgit/nss-pem.git URL: notice, and this entire permission notice in its entirety, /* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK ***** including the disclaimer of warranties. * Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 * copyright notices, this list of conditions, and the following * The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided * 1.
PAGE 170
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to * decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice the following conditions: * and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete * the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included * the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL.
PAGE 171
Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Contributing Authors Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, Cosmin Truta with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 October 3, 2002, are John Bowler Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.
PAGE 172
source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject 2006-Jan-27 to the following restrictions: Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by be misrepresented as being the original source. David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg source or altered source distribution. Introduction ============ The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
PAGE 173
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source somewhere in your documentation that you have used the code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. FreeType code. (`credits') This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this engine'.
PAGE 174
more of the and following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it.
PAGE 175
Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License. _____________________________ MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE 1.8. "License" means this document. Version 1.1 1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum or --------------- extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant 1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.
PAGE 176
Modifications, and/or contains, plus as part of a Larger Work; and any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code (b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, the sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's choic
PAGE 177
must include a selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions distribute.
PAGE 178
Contributor's Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by origin or ownership of the Covered Code. this License. 3.4. Intellectual Property Matters 3.5. Required Notices. (a) Third Party Claims.
PAGE 179
that Covered Code, If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) obligations of Section 3
PAGE 180
and fail to cure If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that survive any termination of this License.
PAGE 181
MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER (b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY and 2.
PAGE 182
compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
PAGE 183
‫‪Code. You should‬‬ ‫‪use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found‬‬ ‫‪in the‬‬ ‫]‪Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.‬‬ ‫‪22.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘّﻲ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ < ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 184
‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪23.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻟﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪EU 2012/19/‬ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 185
‫‪23.7‬‬ ‫‪23.
PAGE 186
‫‪23.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ‪wOOx‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ‪HD‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ) ‪ 16 :(RMS‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬ ‫• ‪® Dolby Digital Plus‬‬ ‫‪Digital‬‬ ‫• ‪Out +DTS 2.0‬‬ ‫™‬ ‫‪23.10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫• ‪USB 3.0 / USB 2.0‬‬ ‫• ‪Ethernet LAN RJ-45‬‬ ‫• ‪)n /g /b /Wi-Fi 802.11a‬ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﺔ(‬ ‫• ‪ BT2.1‬ﻣﻊ ‪ BT4.
PAGE 187
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺟّﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪LED‬ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻠﺤﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴّﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Dect‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪n /g /Wi-Fi 802.11b‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ (ac 802.11‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺷﻘﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 189
‫‪24.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ،Philips‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪. support /www.philips.com‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺩﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻭﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻭﻃﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 190
‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25.
PAGE 191
‫• ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺑﻬﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺨﻔﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺠﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪TP Vision‬ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﻣﺘﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ) ‪ (EMF‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ‪ TP Vision‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗؤﻛﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ TP Vision‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺁﻣﻨًﺎ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ .
PAGE 193
‫‪27.4‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫™ ‪DTS 2.0+Digital Out‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ ، DTS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ . patents.dts.com ://http‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪ . DTS Licensing Limited‬ﺇﻥ ‪DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ‬ ‫‪DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ Digital Out +DTS 2.0‬ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Inc ,DTS . ©Inc ,DTS‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪27.1‬‬ ‫‪MHL‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Mobile High-Definition Link MHL‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ MHL‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.LLC ,MHL‬‬ ‫‪27.
PAGE 194
‫‪27.7‬‬ ‫‪Kensington‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎﺀ(‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Micro Saver Kensington‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺠّﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ACCO World‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠّﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪27.8‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 195
‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﺧﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻓّﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻓّﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪TP Vision‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪45 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪9 APP،‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪25 Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ‪25 Bluetooth،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪25 Bluetooth،‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪25 Bluetooth،‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪31 DMR،‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪22 EasyLink‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪21 HDMI MHL‬‬ ‫‪21 HDMI، ARC‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪62 TV on Demand‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪12 Unicable‬‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ‪62‬‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪36‬‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪Unicable ،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪16‬‬ ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫‪ 27‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎ
PAGE 197
‫‪ 31‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪Screen Smart Fi-Wi ،‬‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ WPS ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪30‬‬ ‫‪ 31‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Fi-Wi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪31‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪44‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪53‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ‪44‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ‪189‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪190‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪65‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪18‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪32‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ‪51‬‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪55‬‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪43‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻴﻜﺴﺖ ‪19‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
PAGE 198
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.